Viper
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
2014 Viper
14ZD-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................83
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................131
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................191
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................261
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................281
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................333
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................351
10
INDEX .....................................................................361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the top surface of the right-hand side
tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the
outboard facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar
frame rail, as well as the Automobile Information Disclo-
sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............12
▫ KeyFob.............................13
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........14
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................15
▫ Replacement Keys .....................16
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................17
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM .......18
▫ Rearming of the System ..................18
▫ To Arm The System.....................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........21
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................21
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................22
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate ..................22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................22
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......23
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........23
2
▫ General Information ....................24
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................25
▫ Power Door Locks .....................26
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................28
▫ Power Windows .......................28
▫ Auto-Down Feature ....................29
▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection .29
▫ Reset Auto-Up ........................30
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................31
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................35
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions ....38
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....41
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped ............................42
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................43
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................43
▫ Seat Belts and Pregnant Women ............44
▫ Seat Belt Extender .....................44
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags ...............................45
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........49
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....50
▫ Child Restraints .......................67
䡵 BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...........78
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................78
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transporting Passengers..................78
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................79
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................80
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................81
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
(Continued)
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
starting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park
lights, and taillights.
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is the ⬙OFF⬙
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
Press the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmit-
ter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or
having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Then,
within 30 seconds, open the liftgate by using the key
cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in the
exterior liftgate handle.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position:
• Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Electronic Immobilization System
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is
opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is
not in the defeat position.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the
following occur:
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
then closed.
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will turn on and remain on for about
four seconds and then fade to off if a door is opened
using the inside door handle.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 200 ft (60 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal
and the illuminated entry system will turn on. refer to
“Uconnect® Access Programmable Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once and the
park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Liftgate
Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This RKE transmitter complies with FCC rules Part 15.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Closeness to a radio transmitter, such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios can affect transmitter operation. To verify if this
is the cause, move the vehicle to another area and test
RKE transmitter operation.
2. The RKE transmitter may become “out of sync” and
will no longer function if operated more than 255
times while out of range of the vehicle (23 ft or 7 m) or
if operated while the vehicle battery is dead or discon-
nected. To “synchronize” the RKE transmitter, cycle
the ignition to the OFF position. Close the hood and all
doors. Press both buttons on the RKE transmitter for
about 10 seconds. The horn will chirp once to ac-
knowledge the signal. Normal RKE transmitter opera-
tion should resume.
3. The RKE transmitter battery may be weak or dead.
The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three
years.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
• For personal security in the event of an collision,
lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when
you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF position lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition
in the ON position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. The driver door is opened.
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Power Window Switches
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may re-
sult in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
Both power window switches have an AUTO-down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the
express up feature unlearns.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylin-
der located on the rear panel or by activating either of the
power door lock switches located on the door trim
panels.
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, press the
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, press the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch
located under the right side of the tail panel, which is
located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When the ignition is in ON/RUN and the parking
brake is not set.
• When vehicle speed is not 0 mph (0 km/h).
• When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter
liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the
System Armed — Coupe” under “Security Alarm
System” for additional information.
The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the liftgate is
open.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Pull Up On The Liftgate
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occu-
pant protection by managing occupant energy during
an impact event
• Passenger side seatbelt incorporates an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR), which locks the seat belt
webbing into position by extending the belt all the way
out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to
restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat —
if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or tether anchor feature also can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For
more information on the tether anchor, refer to Child
Restraint Tether Anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
Each seat belt is a combined lap/shoulder belt system.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder
portion of the belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the force of a collision they best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place can make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions wear
you seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Seat Belt Guide Loop
The seat belt should be routed through the seat belt guide
loop located on the outboard side of the seat while it is in
use.
To utilize the seat belt guide loop, unsnap the guide loop
retainer by pulling up on the head of the retainer and
pulling the seat belt guide loop outward.
Seat Belt Guide Loop Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pulling Up On The Seat Belt Guide Loop Retainer Head Seat Belt Guide Loop Unsnapped
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located at the side of your
seat back. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt.
3. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to make the belt go around your lap.
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter-
nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
5. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a little on the shoulder belt, as shown.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
6. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, lift up on the
shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
7. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. To release the belt, push the red button in the buckle.
The belt will retract automatically to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
collision. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when extended fully, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender, and store it.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for the driver
and passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger’s Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag is mounted underneath a cover in
the passenger’s side of the instrument panel. The words
SRS/AIRBAG is embossed on the air bag covers.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
inflation that are based on several factors, including
collision severity and type and occupant size.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during air bag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back,
extending your arms comfortably to reach the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel.
NOTE:
• The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deac-
tivated if the Occupant Classification System (refer to
“Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls”) esti-
mates the seat is empty or is occupied by someone that
is classified in the “child” category. This could be a
child, a teenager, or even a small adult. Therefore, even
if the driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag deploys, the
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag may not deploy.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”) You should read the instruc-
tions provided with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under “If You Need Assistance.”
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Front Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
• Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Bladder
• Belt Tension Sensor
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front air bags
in a frontal collision is required. Based on the impact
sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the
Advanced Front Air Bags, and seat belt pretentioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact. The ORC may deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag based on input from
the Occupant Classification System (OCS).
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
and
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light for
four to eight seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned to ON/RUN. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off and the PAD Indicator Light
will function normally (Refer to “Passenger Air Bag
Disable (PAD) Indicator Light”). If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound if the light comes on again
after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the Air Bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver Air Bag/Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Unit is
mounted in the steering wheel. The Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag Inflator Unit is mounted underneath a
cover in the passenger side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
may be possible based on several factors, including
collision type, severity and occupant size. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and then fold out of the way,
as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags inflate
fully in about 50 to 70 ms. This is about half of the time
it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then deflate
quickly while helping to restrain the driver and passen-
ger. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented toward
the instrument panel through vent holes in the air bag
material. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to deactivate the front Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
for occupants classified in a category other than a prop-
erly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even
an adult.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deacti-
vated if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward-
facing infant seat
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a small adult
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his/her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Passenger Seat
Occupant Sta-
tus
Passenger Ad-
vanced Air Bag
Disabled Indi-
cator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Passenger Air
Bag Status
Unoccupied
seat *
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags,
heavy brief-
cases, and other
relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Rearward facing
infant seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Child, including
a child seated in
a forward-
facing child re-
straint or
booster seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Properly seated
adult
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
ACTIVATED
* When the right front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even though the
PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
**It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rearward-facing infant seat, in this vehicle.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated
for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
(depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deacti-
vated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his/her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located under-
neath the front passenger seat
• Bladder located beneath the passenger seat cushion
foam
•
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located in the center of the
instrument panel
•
Air Bag Warning Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the passenger seat.
The OCM uses input from the Bladder to classify the
occupant in the passenger seat into a size category. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag deployment based on occupant classification.
Bladder
The Bladder is located beneath the passenger seat cush-
ion foam. The Bladder sends signals to the OCM for
classifying the occupant in the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Bladder. In order
for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the
front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp-
erly may deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. This may result in serious injury or death in
a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit prop-
erly, with the seat back in an upright position, your
back against the seat back, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not decrease the passenger’s total seated weight on
the passenger seat
Decreasing the passenger’s total seated weight on the
passenger seat may result in serious injury or death. The
OCS determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the
passenger’s decreased total seated weight, which may
result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag in a collision and may cause serious injury or
death. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the passenger’s total seated
weight on the passenger seat may result in deactivation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag under certain
conditions, for example:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel)
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• Objects are lodged under the passenger seat
• Objects are lodged between the passenger seat and
center console
• Anything that may decrease the passenger’s total
seated weight
Do not increase the passenger’s total seated weight on
the passenger seat
Increasing the passenger’s total seated weight on the
passenger seat may result in serious injury or death. The
OCS determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the
passenger’s increased total seated weight, which may
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
result in activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag in a collision and may cause serious injury or death.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Increasing the passenger’s total seated weight on the
passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag under certain conditions, for
example:
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
• Objects are lodged under the passenger seat
• Objects are lodged between the passenger seat and
center console
• Accessories that may increase the total seated weight
on the passenger seat are attached to the passenger
seat
• Anything that may increase the passenger’s total
seated weight
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status or when there is a fault present in the OCS.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac-
tivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The PAD Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during
a collision. When the right front passenger seat is empty
or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even
though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen-
ger seat. In this case, the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requires Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Drivers and
adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator
Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the
front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight is
transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door or
instrument panel), the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag may be deactivated and the PAD Indicator Light will
be illuminated.
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will be deacti-
vated for most any size child who is seated properly in
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
the passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even
though the Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This
can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the thresh-
old weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator
Light. In any case, DO NOT assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF.”
If the PAD Indicator Light is Illuminated for an Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the passenger seat, but
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to
allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s total seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as; cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit upright in the passenger
seat, sitting in the center of the seat cushion, with the
passenger’s legs fully extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this sitting position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo-
nents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as
designed. Do not make any modifications to the front
passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be
used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Front Impact Sensors
In front impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is cycled to OFF.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled to
OFF.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
(Continued)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for
your protection in a collision. The Air Bag
Warning Light monitors the internal circuits
and interconnecting wiring associated with air
bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or
until they reach either the height or weight limit of
their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child
restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant
carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either
rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Con-
vertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do,
so they can be used rearward-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than
at least two years old. Children should remain
rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or tether anchorage, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seatback, should use the seat belt in the seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
• Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
• Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the tether
anchorage can lead to failure of an infant or child
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belt is equipped with an automatic
locking retractor for child restraint system installation. It
is designed to keep the lap portion the seat belt tight
around the child restraint (Refer to “Automatic Locking
Mode”).
Installing a Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See section ⬙Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage⬙ for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint. There is a tether strap anchor located
behind the child tether access cover behind the passenger
seat to the anchor.
To attach a child restraint tether strap to the anchor:
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE: While the child seat tether anchor is in use, keep
the access cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced
after the child seat is removed.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
Child Seat Tether Access Cover Child Seat Tether Anchor
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters
have latched.
7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
8. Install the child restraint using the seat belt according
to the manufacturer’s directions.
9. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Deploying air bags could harm your pet. An unrestrained
pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in an collision.
Tether Hook
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Following these few simple guidelines is all that is
necessary for a good break-in.
For the first 500 miles (800 km):
• Keep your vehicle speed below the legal, posted speed
limit and your engine speed below 4,000 RPM.
• Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow,
for long periods.
• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full
throttle acceleration.
• Use the proper gear for your speed range.
• Wait until the engine has reached normal operating
temperature before driving at the recommended maxi-
mum break-in speed.
• Avoid excessive idling.
• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.
NOTE: A new engine will consume some oil during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a sign of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................86
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror ..............86
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................87
▫ Power Mirrors ........................88
▫ Vanity Mirror .........................89
䡵 SEATS ...............................89
▫ Manual Seats .........................90
▫ Power Seats ..........................93
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ...........95
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........95
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................97
▫ Headlight Switch ......................97
▫ Automatic Headlights ...................98
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) ..............98
▫ Headlight Time Delay ...................99
▫ Daytime Running Lights .................99
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................100
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................100
▫ Turn Signals .........................100
3
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................101
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................101
▫ Interior Lights .......................101
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......103
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............103
▫ Wiper Operation ......................104
▫ Mist Feature .........................104
▫ Windshield Washers ...................105
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) .............106
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............106
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ..................107
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest ...................108
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........109
▫ To Activate ..........................110
▫ To Set A Desired Speed..................111
▫ To Deactivate.........................111
▫ To Resume Speed......................111
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............111
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................112
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................112
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN .................114
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .114
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .115
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............116
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........118
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......119
▫ Using HomeLink® ....................121
▫ Security ............................121
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................121
▫ General Information....................122
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........123
䡵 CUPHOLDERS — If Equipped .............125
䡵 STORAGE ............................126
▫ Glove Compartment ...................126
▫ Console Features ......................127
▫ Door Storage.........................129
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............129
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................129
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
NOTE: The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1
button located on the bottom of the mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Assist Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to
one of several predefined locations for immediate sup-
port:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Mo-
bile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road.
Just press 9-1-1 on your mirror and connect.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Controls
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Vanity Mirror
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seats
Forward and Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Seat Adjustment Bar
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out-
board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in
the desired position, and release the lever. To return the
seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the
recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to
its full upright position.
Height Adjustment Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Push
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into
the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to
reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be
properly adjusted to an upright position where the head
restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front
fender to gain access to the hood release lever.
Hood Release Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the
hood latches.
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position.
NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
Hood Release Lever
Opened Hood
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by
the side of the road where large trucks pass by.
Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood. Al-
ways close the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 in (46 cm) and then drop it. This
should secure both latches. If both latches did not
secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to
be applied to secure the latches. Never drive the
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both
latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Headlight Switch
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Daytime Running Lights
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
ever the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights and ambient lighting.
Interior Light Control
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dimmer Control
Interior Lights
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will
operate for several seconds after the washer knob is
released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while
in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is re-
leased.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward
you and then move the steering wheel upward or down-
ward as desired. When the column is in the desired
position, push the release lever forward to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in off/acc
and run.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Foot Rest
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or down-
ward to allow for greater driving comfort.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the pedal:
1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
position.
2. Using a 13 mm socket wrench, loosen the nut on the
pedal.
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate
it upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Adjustable Foot Rest
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple speed control buttons are pressed at the
same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above
the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
on vehicle configuration).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Electronic Speed Control
will deactivate.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn
the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sunvisor, desig-
nate the three different HomeLink® channels. The
HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink® Buttons Sunvisor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical acces-
sories.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON
or ACC position.
The second power outlet is located between the seat
backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is con-
nected directly by the battery and powered at all times.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
Center Console Outlet
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS — If Equipped
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center
console.
Center Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
An electronic glove compartment is located on the pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console rearward of the shift lever.
Cargo Net Storage— If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the
driver and passengers seat.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
Cargo Net Storage Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a storage bin located between the driver and
passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Storage Bin Location
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the
lower center area of the door panel.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Door Panel Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........133
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................134
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....135
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ...............................146
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ............................149
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages ...........................151
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales ...................152
▫ EVIC Red Telltales .....................153
▫ EVIC Green Telltales ...................155
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items ..............155
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........161
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS....................163
▫ Hard-Keys ..........................164
▫ Soft-Keys ...........................164
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System Settings .......................164
▫ SRT Performance Features ...............176
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........179
4
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .179
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......180
▫ Radio Operation ......................181
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA .....................181
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .181
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................182
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......182
▫ Summer Operation ....................188
▫ Winter Operation......................188
▫ Vacation/Storage .....................188
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting ............189
▫ Outside Air Intake .....................189
▫ Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather
Conditions ..........................190
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Climate Controls
2 — Sound System Speaker 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Dimmer Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect® System 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop But-
ton
9 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
5 — Glove Compartment Lock 10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard
Switch, Back Button)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
3. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition is first cycled to ON/RUN, this
light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert
you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a
rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
• Both turn signal arrows will flash in unison with the
front and rear turn signals when the HAZARD
WARNING button is operated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
NOTE: Leaving the hazard flashers on for extended
periods will wear down the battery.
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to
ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
6. EVIC Menu Set (Selectable ICONS)
The EVIC displays are located In the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight section:
• Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow
for non critical warning, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range, to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
• Menu Titles / Odometer
• Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
• Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
• Reconfigurable Telltales
• Audio / Phone Information
• Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-
menus is here
Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for
further information.
7. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
8. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000)
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
The oil level should be maintained in the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone at
all times. Oil level below the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone can cause the
oil pressure warning lamp to illuminate under some
conditions and can cause engine damage.
10. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
11. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
12. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The arrow in this
symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located
on the left side of the vehicle.
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
14. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
cycling the ignition from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
15. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Lights
• Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
16. Cruise Speed Set Value
Speed value shown when set.
17. EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights will display:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator — If
Equipped
This light will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0
gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
18. EVIC Red Telltale Lights
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
EVIC Red Telltale Lights will display:
• Engine Temperature
This telltale warns of an overheated engine
condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge
approaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illu-
minate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause the
temperature gauge to pass H, or 260°F, a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats”
in “What To Do In Emergencies” for more
information.
• Charging System
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicles
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system telltale
remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing
a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE
IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Oil Pressure Warning
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure.
If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This telltale informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
tem. If the telltale comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the NEUTRAL position and the parking
brake applied. The telltale should turn off.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the telltale is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates high engine oil tem-
perature. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
• Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more
doors are ajar. The telltale will show which
doors are ajar.
19. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
is cycled to the ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
20. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Digital Speedometer
• SRT Performance Info
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Radio Info
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostic Codes
• Vehicle Hibernation Settings
• Vehicle Settings
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
• UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Press and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
NOTE: Pressing the LEFT arrow button will override the
EVIC “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of the following sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Selectable Information (Vehicle Info, SRT, Fuel
Economy, Stored Messages, Audio, Trip A, Trip B,
Average MPG)
6. Suspension Status — The suspension status icon will
illuminate in this area. Refer to “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
7. ESC Status — The ESC status icon will illuminate in
this area. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
8. Launch Control status when launch control mode is
entered. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
NOTE: Pressing the LEFT arrow button will override the
EVIC “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On”.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Service Airbag System
• ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show amber caution telltales. These tell-
tales include:
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show red telltales. These telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Trunk Ajar
This telltale is on when the trunk is not closed.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
The oil level should be maintained in the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone at
all times. Oil level below the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone can cause the
oil pressure warning lamp to illuminate under some
conditions and can cause engine damage.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
has completely stopped and the shift lever is in Neutral,
with the Parking Brake applied. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con-
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Tachometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button to change the display between
full tachometer or with digital speedometer.
MPH — km/h
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the MPH-km/h icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press
and release the RIGHT arrow button to change the
display between MPH or km/h
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis-
played. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll
through the following information sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, The tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press
and release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant
temperature will be displayed.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Battery Voltage
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Battery Voltage” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the battery voltage
will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the intake air
temperature will be displayed.
Current Torque
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Torque” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the current torque
will be displayed.
Current Power
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the current power
will be displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
SRT Performance Info
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the SRT icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release
the RIGHT arrow button and 0–60 MPH Duration will be
displayed. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll
through the following information sub-menus:
Braking Distance
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information is
displayed.
Current G-Forces
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Current G-Forces are displayed.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Peak G-Forces
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Peak G-Forces are displayed.
0–60 MPH
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted. Press the RIGHT arrow button and the
next screen will display the following:
Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar-
graph)
Range To Empty (RTE)
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC. The Trip A information will display
the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to reset all the
information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Trip B
Press and release Up & Down arrow button
until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
The Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to reset all the
information.
Audio
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the
active source.
Stored Messages
Press and release the UP arrow button until the
Messages display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages
are.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Diagnostic Codes
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display any present
diagnostic trouble codes along with a brief definition.
Vehicle Hibernation
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Hibernation icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button to activate the Vehicle Hiberna-
tion Mode, which minimizes vehicle battery drain while
the vehicle is being stored.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Coolant Temp.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
• Oil Temp.
• Battery Voltage
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Coolant Temp.
• Oil Temp.
• Battery Voltage
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Okay
Tach. Peak Hold
When enabled, the Tach. Peak Hold function marks the
peak Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on the tachometer
gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000. Using
the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the
steering wheel, select the gauges icon from the menu on
the left side of the cluster (highlighted red is the active
menu item). Use the right arrow to enter the gauges setup
screen, and the up down arrows to select Tach Peak from
the menu of gauge options.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Select up and down to toggle between “ON” and “OFF”.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Tach. Peak Hold
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System Settings
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Au-
dio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped
When in this display. the fuel saver mode will be dis-
played in the driver screen. Touch the Fuel Saver Display
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
make your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
• Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Safety / Assistance
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Hill Start Assist
that provides start assistance when the vehicle is on an
incline. To make your selection, touch the Hill Start Assist
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the windshield wiper speed
is automatically adjusted based on the amount of precipi-
tation. To make your selection, touch the Rain Sensing
Wipers soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will auto-
matically activate/deactivate the high beam headlights
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
when approaching another vehicle. To make your selec-
tion, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head-
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlight With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials, such as iPod’s, Mobile
Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors, away from the top
of the instrument panel where the compass module is
located. These materials can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone
/ Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
SRT Performance Features
To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the “SRT
& More” soft-key then touch the “SRT Performance”
soft-key. Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle through
the features. Press the feature soft-key to select that
feature.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
• Timers
• Engine Values
• Digital Gauge Displays
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile (200 meter)
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1/4 Mile (400 meter)
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter), 1/4 Mile
(400 meter)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h), 1/8
mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile (400 meter).
• The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
• Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last
times recorded.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
the peak forces will continue to display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
the gauge.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range
of the gauge.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph),
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and
gear selector values.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Handling
When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering
and yaw angles.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to choose a stan-
dard or customized display for your SRT home page.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
USB Port Location
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
RADIO ANTENNA
The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear
liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the
windshield behind the interior rearview mirror.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect® Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Temperature Control
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
8. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
9. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Temperature Control Up Button
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the
blower control knob when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if these modes are selected.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................194
▫ Normal Starting.......................194
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................196
▫ After Starting ........................197
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............197
▫ Shifting.............................198
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............200
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light ...............200
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED ......201
䡵 LAUNCH MODE .......................203
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........204
▫ Acceleration .........................204
▫ Traction ............................204
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............205
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................205
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................206
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................207
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............208
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................209
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................211
5
▫ Brake Pad Break-In ....................212
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................213
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .216
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............216
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............216
▫ Electronic Stability Control ..............217
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............220
▫ Tire Markings ........................220
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........224
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........226
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........227
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........231
▫ Tire Pressure ........................231
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................232
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .234
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................234
▫ Tire Types ...........................235
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............236
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............237
▫ Tire Spinning ........................239
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................239
▫ Life Of Tire .........................240
▫ Replacement Tires .....................241
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......242
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....243
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .244
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Premium System ......................247
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................250
▫ 8.4L Engine ..........................250
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................250
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............251
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......251
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................252
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................252
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................253
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............254
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................254
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........256
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................259
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................259
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ...........................259
䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE .................260
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures, which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this
high performance engine. To prevent engine damage,
do not start the engine at temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C).
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• You must disarm the security system in order to start
the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while
continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
To Start The Engine:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
4. Press the red ENGINE START/STOP button located
on the instrument panel. Release the button when the
engine starts.
If Engine Fails To Start
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
(Continued)
Engine START/STOP Button
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-
tion.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue crank-
ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed
all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and
the ENGINE START button once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
lightly press the accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur.
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving
forward from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
city driving. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF
position. This is normal operation of the transmission
reverse inhibitor system.
• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is
warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis-
sion.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
• You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when
starting from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4 4-5 5-6
mph 17 45 50
(km/h) (27) (72) (80)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
There are times when you must shift the trans-
mission directly from first gear into fourth gear
instead of from first gear into second gear. This
is to help you get the best possible fuel
economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is
greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph
(29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and
the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at
20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light”
located in the tachometer will illuminate during these
times.
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the
shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to
fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
economy and prolong engine life.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
race suspension damping setting. When in street mode
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
the system will automatically shift the suspension damp-
ers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard
acceleration and braking situations. There are two modes
of operation:
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (press the
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (press the “RACE”
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
NOTE:
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the sus-
pension damping system will be in the last mode the
system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The
driver can select either Street or Race damping mode
at any time.
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever
the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off
and the car restarted.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument
cluster.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
LAUNCH MODE
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track
surface with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear
position.
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button (Located on
the steering wheel controls).
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
LAUNCH Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
NOTE: If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch con-
trol. Pressing the launch control button or actuating the
brakes will also deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration
through first gear.
• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
• Launch mode should not be used within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine dam-
age.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
WARNING! (Continued)
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop and then release the button
and the handle.
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System
Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake
is not applied please see your authorized dealer.
• Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
cluster will automatically go to the highest illumina-
tion setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged be-
fore driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may
notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under
certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during
light brake applications).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated
hard brake applications from high speeds during initial
break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake
loading, such as may be encountered when descending
long mountain grades.
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down-
shifting the transmission whenever possible.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
(Continued)
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction,
braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele-
phones.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type as the original equipment and the tires must be
properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the
computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not
turn on during starting, have it repaired
promptly.
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains
on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road
speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that the
system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to
standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and
cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light
remains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to
have the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the
parking brake is fully released, see your authorized
dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari-
ous driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and under-
steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro-
priate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer
and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or
understeer.
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating
Modes
The ESC system may have five available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC Full Off
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability fea-
tures are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press
and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
ESC Button
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left
of the odometer). The “ESC OFF” message may appear in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road only.
Sport Mode - If Equipped
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, press
the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel).
The “ESC Sport Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC
SPORT⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of
the odometer). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Track Mode - If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, press
the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC Track Light” will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC TRACK⬙ message will display in
the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Rain Mode
Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver
wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or
experience with the vehicle’s response. To enter the “Rain
Mode” mode, press the “ESC” switch three times. The
“ESC Rain Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC RAIN⬙
message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the
odometer). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything caus-
ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres-
sure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
learns the location of each sensor though system pro-
gramming. Although not required, the manufacturer
recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the
tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location.
See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side”
as shown in the diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Rotation
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• TPM Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values changing color.
An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC
will change color back to the original color, and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-
-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada C4W4MA4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
8.4L Engine
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
Carpet Access Door
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
Edge Of Access Door
Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
original position.
Fuel Door Open Carpet Into Original Position
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
On Trailer All OK
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exer-
cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive-
ways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul-
ders.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ...........262
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............262
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................263
▫ Torque Specifications ...................264
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED .............265
▫ TIREFIT Storage ......................266
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation .....266
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions...............267
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT ..............270
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........275
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............279
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........280
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
gear possible.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) 1/2” x 20 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in left side of the trunk.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
TIREFIT Location
TIREFIT Components
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Power Button
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug (located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Using the TIREFIT sealant may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) to become inoperable. It is
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have the sensor function checked.
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement.”
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
ing.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
WARNING! (Continued)
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access
panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the
vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
Battery Location
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach,
but without allowing the vehicles to touch one an-
other.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive post (+) in the engine
compartment. Refer to the following illustration for
remote jump-starting connections.
1 — Positive Battery Post (+)
2 — Negative Battery Post (-)
Remote Jump Start Connections
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
8. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L ..........283
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .284
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................284
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................286
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................286
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........287
▫ Engine Oil ..........................288
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................289
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................290
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............291
▫ Hibernation Mode ....................292
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............293
▫ Body Lubrication .....................295
▫ Wiper Blades ........................295
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................296
▫ Exhaust System ......................296
▫ Cooling System ......................299
▫ Brake System ........................305
▫ Manual Transmission ..................307
7
▫ Hydraulic Clutch .....................308
▫ Rear Axle ...........................308
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................309
䡵 FUSES ..............................316
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............317
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................325
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................327
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................328
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp ..............................329
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ............329
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp ................329
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp .................329
▫ Backup Lamps........................329
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................330
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS .331
▫ Engine .............................331
▫ Chassis ............................332
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system
monitors the performance of the emissions and engine
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
tests can be performed.
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add
oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 0W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR® or Pennzoil
Ultra® is preferred for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside
the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A
remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart-
ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce-
dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of
the rear compartment carpet.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months
of storage time without losing radio and engine control-
ler adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative
to disconnecting the battery.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to
store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend
doing one of the following:
• Disconnect the battery.
• Use the battery charger.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month
charge).
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC).
3. Press and hold the right arrow button on the steering
wheel controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown
from ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Press the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Press the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (anti-
freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser/radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser/radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-
12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add cool-
ant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
(Continued)
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-
12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec-
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system
components should be inspected periodically. Refer to
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use
of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling
point or unidentified as to specification, may result in
sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
(Continued)
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
Change Brake Fluid
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo-
sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing
other underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can
occur.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Change Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Hydraulic Clutch
Master Cylinder – Clutch Fluid Level Check
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The
axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the
filler plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only
the manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom-
mended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer
to “Fluids Lubes and Genuine Parts” in “ Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Lubricant
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if
contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Leather or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care and Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Application
of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Aero Group — If Equipped
Please review all of the precautionary notes regarding the
Aero Group option.
Front Splitter
The front splitter will not flex or compress against
impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the
splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter
should be replaced.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall
speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can
damage your splitter.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage
to your splitter.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel
Front Splitter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
center contains fuses and relays.
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
3 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan
4 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan Rly High
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
5 — 40 Amp
Green
— ABS/ESP Pump Feed
6 — 40 Amp
Green
— Starter
7 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
8 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
9 — 30 Amp Pink — Washer Pump
10 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Power Lock)
11 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
12 — 25 Amp
Natural
— ABS/ESP Valve Feed
13 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
Horn
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
14 — — 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
15 — — 10 Amp Red Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
16 — — 15 Amp Blue KIN, RF Hub
17 — — 25 Amp cir-
cuit breaker
Power Seats
18 — 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Mod
19 — 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Mod
20 — 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
21 — 20 Amp Blue — Wiper
22 — — — B+ Jumper
23 — — 15 Amp Blue HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
24 — — 25 Amp
Natural
PCM- Powertrain Control Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
25 — — 25 Amp
Natural
Fuel Pump
26 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
ASD #1
27 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
ASD #2
28 — — — Spare
29 — 40 Amp
Green
— HVAC Blower
30 — 20 Amp Yel-
low
— RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
31 — — — B+ Jumper
32 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
33 — 20 Amp Yel-
low
— Run Acc relay
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
34 — — — B+ Jumper
35 — — — Spare
36 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run
37 — — 15 Amp Blue Cluster, Camera
38 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
Active Damping Suspension
39 — — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module, In Car Temp, Blower Relay
40 — — — Spare
41 G8VA — — Run/Start
42 G8VA — — Fuel Door
43AC (For-
ward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red SCCM
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
43BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Corax
44AC (For-
ward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper.
44BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red IBS
45 — — 10 Amp Red PCM- Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump Re-
lay.
46 — — 10 Amp Red ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
47 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
48 — — 10 Amp Red SCCM
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
49 — — 25 Amp
Natural
Amplifier
50 HC Micro — — Rad Fan
51 HC Micro — — Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
52 HC Micro — — Starter Relay
53 HC Micro — — Rear Window Defroster Relay
54 HC Relay — — Rad Fan Relay High
55 HC Micro — — Wiper ON/OFF
56 HC Micro — — Wiper LO/HI
57 G8VA — — Horn Relay
58 G8VA — — A/C Clutch Relay
59 HC Micro — — HVAC Blower
60 HC Micro — — Fuel Pump
61 G8VA — — Run Relay #1
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
62 G8VA — — Run Relay #2
63 HC Micro — — ASD #1
64 HC Micro — — ASD #2
65 G8VA — — Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window Switch
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for
storing your vehicle for extended periods.
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to
the fuel tank.
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
related acids in the crankcase.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
prevent tire flat spotting.
• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera-
tures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry,
well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger (1.5
Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge protec-
tion to the battery. However, do not leave the trickle
charger hooked up to the battery without being
plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in
further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is
not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform
the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative
terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve
battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/
Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci-
dental damage to the finish.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con-
trol system to lose memory of some “learned” functions.
After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough
until the control module “relearns” these functions. Us-
ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine
controller from loosing its memory.
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that
the voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop
more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage
drops below 12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge
procedure in the Service Manual.
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are
completely closed.
2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter is operating and that the battery is good.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
check, which follows:
Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the alarm
SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating
properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
system. See your authorized dealer for service.
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve bat-
tery power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Mainte-
nance Procedures for further information.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Message Center Indica-
tors
103
Cluster LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Gauge Pack 103
Heater Control 37
Interior Lamp LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Courtesy Foot Well
Lights
LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Lift-
gate)
168
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Head-
lamp
HID (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp
LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL)
LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamp 2821M
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal
Lamp
LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
Rear Marker Lamp 2821M
Bulb Number
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
License Lamp LED (Serviced at Autho-
rized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 16 Gallons 60.6 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use SAE 0W-40, API Certified. 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
3.4 Quarts 3.2 Liters
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
1.5 Quarts 1.4 Liters
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent).
16 Quarts 15 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming
to MS-12106).
Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil
such as MOPAR® or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent
engine oil.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs, see
your authorized dealer.
Fuel Selection We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane
Only or Higher.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® Brake and Clutch
Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+ 4, MOPAR® or ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the suspension components.
• Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check power steering fluid level.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 335
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
or 12 months.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 18
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
338 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 42
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 339
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
340 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 341
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
342 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.*
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 343
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
344 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 345
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (240 000 km) whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
346 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 347
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change brake fluid
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
348 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) or 120
months whichever comes first.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 349
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................353
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............353
▫ Prepare A List ........................353
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............353
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............353
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............354
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........354
▫ In Mexico Contact:.....................355
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................355
▫ Service Contract ......................355
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............356
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................357
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............357
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. ...............................357
▫ In Canada...........................357
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............358
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 355
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 357
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
358 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 359
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
360 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................211
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................213
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............301
Adding Fuel .............................254
Adding Washer Fluid ......................296
Additives, Fuel ...........................252
Adjustable Pedals .........................107
Airbag..................................45
Airbag Deployment ......................50, 63
Airbag Light .....................50, 65, 80, 135
Airbag Maintenance ........................64
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .290
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................293
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............190
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............293, 294
Air Conditioning System ....................293
Air Pressure, Tires.........................232
Alarm Light .............................139
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antenna................................181
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............300, 330
Capacities ............................330
Disposal ..............................303
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).............213, 216
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................145, 215
Appearance Care .........................309
Auto Down Power Windows ..................29
Automatic Door Locks ......................27
Automatic Headlights .......................98
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................27
Auto Up Power Windows ....................29
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........123
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................123
Battery.................................291
Emergency Starting ......................275
Jump Starting ..........................275
362 INDEX
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........23
Location ..............................291
Saving Feature (Protection) ................292
Storing Vehicle .........................292
Belts, Seat ..........................33, 35, 80
Bladder .................................56
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................295
B-Pillar Location ..........................227
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............216
Brake, Parking ...........................209
Brake System .........................211,305
Anti-Lock (ABS) .................211,213, 216
Fluid Check ........................305, 332
Master Cylinder ........................305
Warning Light .........................137
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ......78, 212
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................102
Bulb Replacement .........................328
Bulbs, Light...........................81, 327
Camera, Rear ............................112
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........330
Capacities, Fluid ..........................330
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................289
Power Steering .........................208
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................302
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................79, 254
Car Washes .............................309
Cellular Phone ...........................181
Chains, Tire .............................242
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................222
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................141, 284
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............78
Checks, Safety ............................78
Child Restraint ....................67, 69, 70, 74
10
INDEX 363
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ................75
Clean Air Gasoline ........................250
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................310
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................295
Climate Control ..........................182
Clutch Fluid .............................308
Compact Spare Tire ........................237
Contract, Service ..........................355
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........302
Cooling System...........................299
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............301
Coolant Capacity .......................330
Coolant Level ......................299, 303
Disposal of Used Coolant .................303
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................300
Inspection ............................303
Points to Remember .....................304
Pressure Cap ..........................302
Radiator Cap ..........................302
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......300, 330, 331
Corrosion Protection .......................309
Cruise Light .............................142
Cupholders .............................125
Customer Assistance .......................353
Data Recorder, Event .......................66
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............103
Daytime Running Lights .....................99
Dealer Service............................286
Defroster, Rear Window.....................129
Defroster, Windshield .......................81
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................103
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................284
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................101
Dipsticks
Power Steering .........................208
364 INDEX
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................303
Door Locks ..............................25
Door Locks, Automatic ......................27
Door Opener, Garage.......................114
Doors ..................................25
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................205
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........123
Electric Remote Mirrors......................88
Electronic Brake Control System ...............216
Traction Control System ...................216
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............217
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......112
Emergency Brake .........................209
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................279
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................262
Jump Starting ..........................275
Overheating ...........................262
Towing ..............................280
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........284
Engine .................................283
Air Cleaner ...........................290
Break-In Recommendations .................78
Checking Oil Level ......................288
Compartment ..........................283
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................299, 331
Cooling ..............................299
Exhaust Gas Caution ................32, 79, 254
Fails to Start ...........................196
Flooded, Starting .......................196
Fuel Requirements ...................250, 330
Oil...........................288, 330, 331
10
INDEX 365
Oil Change Interval ......................288
Oil Filler Cap ..........................289
Oil Selection .......................288, 330
Overheating ...........................262
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................289, 330
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............62
Ethanol ................................251
Event Data Recorder ........................66
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................32, 79, 254
Exhaust System ........................79, 296
Exterior Lighting ..........................97
Exterior Lights ............................81
Filler Location Fuel ........................140
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................290
Engine Oil .........................289, 331
Engine Oil Disposal .....................289
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................262
Turn Signal ......................81, 100, 135
Flash-To-Pass ............................101
Flooded Engine Starting ....................196
Fluid Capacities ..........................330
Fluid Leaks ..............................82
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ............................305, 332
Capacities ............................330
Clutch Fluid ...........................308
Cooling System .........................299
Engine Oil ............................288
Manual Transmission .................307, 332
Power Steering ......................208, 332
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........331
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................262
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................279
Fuel...................................250
366 INDEX
Additives .............................252
Clean Air .............................250
Ethanol ..............................251
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................140
Gasoline ..............................250
Gauge ...............................140
Materials Added ........................252
Methanol .............................251
Octane Rating ......................250, 331
Requirements .......................250, 330
Tank Capacity ..........................330
Fuses ..................................316
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........114,121
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................250
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................250
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................250
Gauges
Fuel .................................140
Speedometer ..........................135
Tachometer ............................139
General Information......................17, 24
Glass Cleaning ...........................313
Ground Clearance .........................260
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Stand-
ing Water .............................205
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................262
Headlights
Automatic .............................98
Delay ................................99
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........101
Lights On Reminder .....................100
On With Wipers ......................98, 106
Passing ..............................101
Switch ................................97
Time Delay ............................99
10
INDEX 367
Head Restraints ...........................95
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .101
Holder, Cup .............................125
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener).............114
Hood Release .............................95
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid .....................308
Illuminated Entry ..........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................15
Infant Restraint .........................67, 69
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................86
Instrument Cluster ........................135
Instrument Panel and Controls ................133
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............313
Interior Appearance Care....................312
Interior Lights ...........................101
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............103
Introduction ..............................4
Jump Starting ............................275
KeyFob.................................12
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Entry System.....................12, 21
Keyless Go...............................12
Key, Programming .........................17
Key, Replacement ..........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................15
Knee Bolster..............................45
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................100
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................35
Latches .................................82
Hood ................................95
Latch Plate...............................38
Lead Free Gasoline ........................250
Leaks, Fluid ..............................82
Life of Tires .............................240
368 INDEX
Liftgate .................................31
Light Bulbs ..............................81
Lights................................81, 97
Airbag ..........................65, 80, 135
Alarm ...............................139
Anti-Lock .........................145, 215
Automatic Headlights .....................98
Brake Warning .........................137
Bulb Replacement ....................327, 328
Cruise ...............................142
Daytime Running ........................99
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............100, 101
Exterior ...............................81
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................262
Headlights .............................97
Headlights On Reminder ..................100
Headlights On With Wipers .............98, 106
Headlight Switch ........................97
High Beam ............................101
High Beam Indicator .....................139
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............101
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Instrument Cluster .......................97
Intensity Control ........................102
Interior ..............................101
Lights On Reminder .....................100
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........141
Oil Pressure ...........................139
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........103
Passing ..............................101
Seat Belt Reminder ......................135
Security Alarm .........................139
Service ...........................327, 328
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .141
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........140, 244
Turn Signal .........................81, 100
Vanity Mirror ...........................89
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......135
10
INDEX 369
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................227
Locks ..................................25
Automatic Door .........................27
Auto Unlock ...........................27
Door .................................25
Power Door ............................26
Low Tire Indicator ........................244
Low Tire Pressure System ...................244
Lubrication, Body .........................295
Lug Nuts ...............................263
Maintenance Free Battery....................291
Maintenance Procedures ....................287
Maintenance Schedule ......................334
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .141, 284
Manual, Service ..........................358
Manual Transmission ...................197, 308
Fluid Level Check ...................307, 332
Lubricant Selection ......................332
Shift Speeds ...........................200
Methanol ...............................251
Mirrors .................................86
Electric Remote .........................88
Outside ............................87, 88
Rearview ..............................86
Vanity ................................89
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................244
Mopar Parts..........................286, 357
MTBE/ETBE ............................251
Multi-Function Control Lever .................100
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................78
Occupant Restraints ......................33, 63
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................250
Oil, Engine .......................288, 330, 331
370 INDEX
Capacity .............................330
Change Interval ........................288
Checking .............................288
Dipstick ..............................288
Disposal ..............................289
Filter .............................289, 331
Filter Disposal .........................289
Materials Added to ......................289
Recommendation ....................288, 330
Viscosity ..........................289, 330
Oil Filter, Selection ........................289
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................284
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............114
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................87
Overheating, Engine .......................262
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,358
Paint Care ..............................309
Panic Alarm ..............................22
Parking Brake............................209
Parking On Hill ..........................209
Passing Light ............................101
Pedals, Adjustable.........................107
Pets....................................77
Pets, Transporting..........................77
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........227
Power
Brakes ...............................211
Door Locks ............................26
Mirrors ...............................88
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........123
Steering ...........................207, 208
Windows ..............................28
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................44
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................43
10
INDEX 371
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires ..........................234
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........302
Radio Antenna ...........................181
Radio Operation ..........................181
Rear Camera.............................112
Rear Liftgate .............................31
Rear Window Defroster .....................129
Rear Window Features .....................129
Reclining Front Seats .......................91
Recorder, Event Data .......................66
Recreational Towing .......................259
Reformulated Gasoline .....................250
Refrigerant ..............................294
Reminder, Lights On .......................100
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................43
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........180
Replacement Keys .........................16
Replacement Parts.........................286
Replacement Tires .........................241
Reporting Safety Defects ....................357
Restraint, Head ...........................95
Restraints, Child...........................67
Restraints, Infant ..........................69
Restraints, Occupant ........................33
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................279
Rotation, Tires ...........................243
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................80
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................81
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................357
Safety, Exhaust Gas ......................32, 79
Safety Information, Tire .....................220
Safety Tips ...............................78
Schedule, Maintenance .....................334
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................314
372 INDEX
Seat Belt Reminder .........................43
Seat Belts ...........................33, 35, 80
And Pregnant Women .....................44
Child Restraint ..................67, 69, 70, 74
Extender ..............................44
Inspection .............................80
Operating Instructions ....................38
Pretensioners ...........................43
Untwisting Procedure .....................41
Seats ...................................89
Adjustment .......................89, 90, 93
Reclining ..............................91
Security Alarm ............................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............331
Selection of Oil ...........................288
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................15
Sentry Key Programming ....................17
Sentry Key Replacement .....................16
Service Assistance .........................353
Service Contract ..........................355
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .141
Service Manuals ..........................358
Shift Indicator Light .......................200
Shift Speeds ..........................197, 200
Shoulder Belts ............................35
Signals, Turn.......................81, 100, 135
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................242
Snow Tires ..............................235
Spare Tire ...........................237, 238
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................109
Speedometer.............................135
Sport Mode .............................145
Starting ................................194
Emergency (Jump Starting) ................275
Engine Fails to Start .....................196
Starting and Operating .....................194
Starting Procedures ........................194
10
INDEX 373
Steering
Column Controls .......................100
Power ............................207, 208
Tilt Column ...........................106
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............180
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .180
Storage ................................325
Storage, Vehicle...........................188
Stuck, Freeing............................279
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........45
Tachometer..............................139
Tilt Steering Column .......................106
Time Delay, Headlight.......................99
Tire and Loading Information Placard ...........227
TIREFIT ................................265
Tire Markings ............................220
Tires.............................81, 231, 359
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................240
Air Pressure ...........................231
Chains ...............................242
Compact Spare .........................237
General Information .....................231
High Speed ...........................234
Inflation Pressures .......................232
Life of Tires ...........................240
Load Capacity ......................227, 228
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............244
Pressure Warning Light ...................140
Quality Grading ........................359
Radial ...............................234
Replacement ...........................241
Rotation ..............................243
Safety ............................220, 231
Sizes ................................222
Snow Tires ............................235
Spinning .............................239
Tread Wear Indicators ....................239
374 INDEX
Tire Safety Information .....................220
Towing .............................259, 280
Disabled Vehicle ........................280
Recreational ...........................259
Traction ................................204
Traction Control ..........................216
Trailer Towing ...........................259
Transmission ............................307
Fluid ................................332
Shifting ...........................197, 200
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........21
Transporting Pets ..........................77
Tread Wear Indicators ......................239
Turn Signals..........................100, 135
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................359
Universal Transmitter ......................114
Unleaded Gasoline ........................250
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................41
Upholstery Care ..........................313
Vanity Mirrors ............................89
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................228
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Vehicle Storage........................188, 325
Vinyl Trim ..............................313
Viscosity, Engine Oil ....................289, 330
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................262
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .135
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................356
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................296
10
INDEX 375
Washers, Windshield....................105, 296
Washing Vehicle ..........................309
Water
Driving Through ........................205
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................310
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................310
Window Fogging .........................189
Windows ................................28
Power ................................28
Windshield Defroster .......................81
Windshield Washers.................103, 105, 296
Windshield Wiper Blades....................295
Windshield Wipers ........................103
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................295
Wipers, Intermittent .......................103
376 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Viper
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
2014 Viper
14ZD-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
